PR ld/12001
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
9fbcbd81 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54 59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
951999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
96Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
cd6d6c15
NC
1026@item initfirst
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032objects.
1033
1034@item interpose
1035Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036but the primary executable.
1037
5fa222e4
AM
1038@item lazy
1039When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042Lazy binding is the default.
1043
cd6d6c15
NC
1044@item loadfltr
1045Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046runtime.
1047
1048@item muldefs
1049Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051@item nocombreloc
1052Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054@item nocopyreloc
1055Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057@item nodefaultlib
1058Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061@item nodelete
1062Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064@item nodlopen
1065Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067@item nodump
1068Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
6aa29e7b
JJ
1070@item noexecstack
1071Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073@item norelro
1074Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
cd6d6c15
NC
1076@item now
1077When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081first called.
1082
1083@item origin
1084Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
6aa29e7b
JJ
1086@item relro
1087Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
24718e3b
L
1089@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
cd6d6c15
NC
1095@end table
1096
ece2d90e 1097Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1098
1099@kindex -(
1100@cindex groups of archives
1101@item -( @var{archives} -)
1102@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1104either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1109archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1112they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113resolved.
1114
1115Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1116it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117more archives.
1118
69da35b5
NC
1119@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1124recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1125and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1126the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1127behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1130
4a43e768
AM
1131@kindex --as-needed
1132@kindex --no-as-needed
1133@item --as-needed
1134@itemx --no-as-needed
1135This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1136on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1137the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1139needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1144@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
e56f61be
L
1146@kindex --add-needed
1147@kindex --no-add-needed
1148@item --add-needed
1149@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1150These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1154
252b5132
RH
1155@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156@item -assert @var{keyword}
1157This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159@kindex -Bdynamic
1160@kindex -dy
1161@kindex -call_shared
1162@item -Bdynamic
1163@itemx -dy
1164@itemx -call_shared
1165Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1166for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1167default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1168for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1169multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1170@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1171
a1ab1d2a
UD
1172@kindex -Bgroup
1173@item -Bgroup
1174Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1177@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1178only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1179
252b5132
RH
1180@kindex -Bstatic
1181@kindex -dn
1182@kindex -non_shared
1183@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1184@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1185@itemx -dn
1186@itemx -non_shared
1187@itemx -static
1188Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1189platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1190variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1191may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1192library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1193option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1194option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1195shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1197libraries.
252b5132
RH
1198
1199@kindex -Bsymbolic
1200@item -Bsymbolic
1201When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1203for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
40b36307
L
1207@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1210symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1211This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212libraries.
1213
55255dae
L
1214@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1217typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222which support shared libraries.
1223
1224The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
40b36307
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228@item --dynamic-list-data
1229Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1234is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
0b8a70d9
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
252b5132
RH
1240@kindex --check-sections
1241@kindex --no-check-sections
1242@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1243@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1244Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1245been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1246perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1248allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1249restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1250Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1251force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252option.
252b5132 1253
ddbb8a31
NC
1254@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1259by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1265behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271required by the output binary. With
1272@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
252b5132
RH
1403@cindex help
1404@cindex usage
1405@kindex --help
1406@item --help
1407Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
ea20a7da
CC
1409@kindex --target-help
1410@item --target-help
1411Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
2509a395
SL
1413@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1415Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1416@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1417
1418@cindex memory usage
1419@kindex --no-keep-memory
1420@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1421@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1423instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1424necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1425while linking a large executable.
1426
1427@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1428@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1429@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1430@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1431Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1432is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1435libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1436
aa713662
L
1437@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438@kindex -z muldefs
1439@item --allow-multiple-definition
1440@itemx -z muldefs
1441Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443first definition will be used.
1444
b79e8c78 1445@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1446@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1447@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1448@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1449Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1450This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1453how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
903249d7
NC
1455The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458a shared library.
1459
1460The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463@itemize @bullet
1464@item
1465A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467resolvable at load time.
1468@item
1469There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475appropriate memset function.
1476@end itemize
b79e8c78 1477
31941635
L
1478@kindex --no-undefined-version
1479@item --no-undefined-version
1480Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482will be issued instead.
1483
3e3b46e5
PB
1484@kindex --default-symver
1485@item --default-symver
1486Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1487exported symbols.
1488
1489@kindex --default-imported-symver
1490@item --default-imported-symver
1491Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1493
252b5132
RH
1494@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1496Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1497files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1499This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1500errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502inappropriate.
1503
fe7929ce
AM
1504@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex --no-whole-archive
1510@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1511Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1512archive files.
1513
1514@cindex output file after errors
1515@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516@item --noinhibit-exec
1517Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
0a9c1c8e
CD
1522@kindex -nostdlib
1523@item -nostdlib
1524Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
252b5132 1528@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1529@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1531@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1533@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1534object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1536should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1539list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1540command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1542@end ifclear
1543
36af4a4e
JJ
1544@kindex -pie
1545@kindex --pic-executable
1546@item -pie
1547@itemx --pic-executable
1548@cindex position independent executables
1549Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1550ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1552address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1553normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
252b5132
RH
1556@kindex -qmagic
1557@item -qmagic
1558This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560@kindex -Qy
1561@item -Qy
1562This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564@kindex --relax
1565@cindex synthesizing linker
1566@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1567@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1568@item --relax
28d5f677 1569@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1570An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1571@ifset GENERIC
1572This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1575@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1576@end ifset
1577@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1578@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1579@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1580@ifset XTENSA
1581@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1583@ifset M68HC11
1584@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1586@ifset POWERPC
1587@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588@end ifset
252b5132 1589
28d5f677
NC
1590On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1595
1596On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1599This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1601@end ifset
1602
1603@ifset GENERIC
1604On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605but ignored.
1606@end ifset
1607
28d5f677
NC
1608On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@cindex retaining specified symbols
1612@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1614@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1616Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1619@ifset GENERIC
1620(such as VxWorks)
1621@end ifset
1622where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623run-time memory.
1624
1625@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1632@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1633@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1634@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1635Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1636linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1637arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1638them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1639also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1641@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1642ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
ff5dcc92 1645The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1646SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1647@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1650gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1651file systems.
252b5132 1652
ff5dcc92 1653For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1654followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1655the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1660@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1662When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1663happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664of the input files.
1665
1666When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1669explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1670specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1671@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1672either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673appearing multiple times.
1674
28c309a2
NC
1675This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678runtime linker would do.
1679
252b5132 1680The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1681libraries:
252b5132
RH
1682@enumerate
1683@item
ff5dcc92 1684Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1685@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1686Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1687between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1690at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1693@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1694On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1697@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1698On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1703@item
ec4eb78a
L
1704For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708@item
252b5132
RH
1709The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710@item
1711For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713@end enumerate
1714
1715If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716warning and continue with the link.
1717@end ifset
1718
1719@kindex -shared
1720@kindex -Bshareable
1721@item -shared
1722@itemx -Bshareable
1723@cindex shared libraries
1724Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1726shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1727undefined symbols in the link.
1728
252b5132 1729@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1730@item --sort-common
1731@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1733This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1738specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1739
2509a395
SL
1740@kindex --sort-section=name
1741@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1742This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743patterns in the linker script.
1744
2509a395
SL
1745@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1747This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748patterns in the linker script.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1751@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1752Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1753each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1754size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1755
1756@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1757@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1758Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1759output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1760This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1761certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1763that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1765input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1767many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1768
1769@kindex --stats
1770@item --stats
1771Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772as execution time and memory usage.
1773
2509a395 1774@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1775@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1778that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
252b5132
RH
1780@kindex --traditional-format
1781@cindex traditional format
1782@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1783For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1785use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1788For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1789symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1792trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1793combine duplicate entries.
1794
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1797Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1799times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800line.
1801@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1804should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1810@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1811@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1815@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1816
2509a395
SL
1817@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1819@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
560e09e9
NC
1823@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1826values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828@table @samp
1829@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1830Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1831
1832@item report-all
da8bce14 1833Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1834
1835@item ignore-in-object-files
1836Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1842when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844command line.
1845@end table
1846
1847The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852can change this to a warning.
1853
252b5132
RH
1854@kindex --verbose
1855@cindex verbose
1856@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1857@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1858Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1859supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1860the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1861
1862@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1863@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1864@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1865Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1866used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1867about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1868is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1869see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1870use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1871symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1872@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1873
7ce691ae 1874@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1875@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1876@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1877@item --warn-common
1878Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1879a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1880but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1881you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1882Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1883warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1884
1885There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1886
1887@table @samp
1888@item int i = 1;
1889A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1890file.
1891
1892@item extern int i;
1893An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1894There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1895variable somewhere.
1896
1897@item int i;
1898A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1899variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1900The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1901single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1902size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1903a definition of the same variable.
1904@end table
1905
1906The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1907Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1908just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1909encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1910a common symbol.
1911
1912@enumerate
1913@item
1914Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1915definition for the symbol.
1916@smallexample
1917@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1918 overridden by definition
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1920@end smallexample
1921
1922@item
1923Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1924the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1925except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1926@smallexample
1927@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1928 overriding common
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1930@end smallexample
1931
1932@item
1933Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1934@smallexample
1935@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1936 of `@var{symbol}'
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1938@end smallexample
1939
1940@item
1941Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1942@smallexample
1943@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1944 overridden by larger common
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1946@end smallexample
1947
1948@item
1949Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1950the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1951encountered in a different order.
1952@smallexample
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overriding smaller common
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1956@end smallexample
1957@end enumerate
1958
1959@kindex --warn-constructors
1960@item --warn-constructors
1961Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1962object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1963detect the use of global constructors.
1964
1965@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1966@item --warn-multiple-gp
1967Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1968This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1969Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1970section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1971of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1972base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1973base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1974bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1975large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1976values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1977option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1978
1979@kindex --warn-once
1980@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1981@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1982@item --warn-once
1983Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1984which refers to it.
1985
1986@kindex --warn-section-align
1987@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1988@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1989@item --warn-section-align
1990Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1991alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1992The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1993is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1994the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1995
8fdd7217
NC
1996@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1997@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1998Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1999
a0c402a5
L
2000@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2001@item --warn-alternate-em
2002Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2003
560e09e9
NC
2004@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2005@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2007@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2008This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2009
2010@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2011@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2012This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2013it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2014
252b5132
RH
2015@kindex --whole-archive
2016@cindex including an entire archive
2017@item --whole-archive
2018For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2019@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2020in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2021files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2022library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2023library. This option may be used more than once.
2024
7ec229ce 2025Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2026about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2027Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2028list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2029your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2030
2509a395
SL
2031@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2032@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2033Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2034@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2035undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2036@var{symbol}.
2037
2038This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2039wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2040wishes to call the system function, it should call
2041@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2042
2043Here is a trivial example:
2044
2045@smallexample
2046void *
cc2f008e 2047__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2048@{
cc2f008e 2049 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2050 return __real_malloc (c);
2051@}
2052@end smallexample
2053
ff5dcc92 2054If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2055all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2056instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2057call the real @code{malloc} function.
2058
2059You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2060links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2061you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2062file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2063call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2064
6aa29e7b
JJ
2065@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2066@item --eh-frame-hdr
2067Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2068@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2069
6c1439be
L
2070@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2071@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2072@item --enable-new-dtags
2073@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2074This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2075systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2076@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2077If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2078created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2079those options are only available for ELF systems.
2080
2d643429 2081@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2082@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2083Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2084close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2085time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2086increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2087value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2088
fdc90cb4
JJ
2089@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2090@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2091Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2092@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2093new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2094the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2095hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2096
35835446
JR
2097@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2098@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2099This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2100linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2101for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2102about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2103
4f9c04f7 2104Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21051021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2106run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2107has been used.
2108
2109The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2110enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2111
c0065db7
RM
2112@kindex --build-id
2113@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2114@item --build-id
2115@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2116Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2117The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2118file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2119@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2120parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2121@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2122@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2123an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2124characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2125omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2126
2127The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2128that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2129unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2130to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2131file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2132string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2133
2134Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2135@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2136@end table
2137
0285c67d
NC
2138@c man end
2139
36f63dca 2140@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2141
0285c67d
NC
2142@c man begin OPTIONS
2143
ff5dcc92 2144The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2145the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2146normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2147use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2148@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2149like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2150symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2151object file).
2152
2153In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2154support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2155PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2156values by either a space or an equals sign.
2157
ff5dcc92 2158@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2159
2160@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2161@item --add-stdcall-alias
2162If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2163as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2164[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2165
2166@kindex --base-file
2167@item --base-file @var{file}
2168Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2169addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2170@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2171[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2172
2173@kindex --dll
2174@item --dll
2175Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2176@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2177file.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2179
88183869
DK
2180@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2181@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2182@item --enable-long-section-names
2183@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2184The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2185the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2186for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2187fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2188to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2189allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2190disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2191generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2192as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2193with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2194GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2195information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2196option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2197section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2198when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2199image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2200[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2201
252b5132
RH
2202@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2203@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2204@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2207do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2208only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2209resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2210undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2211@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2212to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2213warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2214import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2215to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2216feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2217@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2218mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2220
522f09cd
KT
2221@kindex --leading-underscore
2222@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2223@item --leading-underscore
2224@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2225For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2226in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2227disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2228
252b5132
RH
2229@cindex DLLs, creating
2230@kindex --export-all-symbols
2231@item --export-all-symbols
2232If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2233be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2234otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2235explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2236attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2237option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2238@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2239@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2240exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2241re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2242such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2243@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2244@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2245Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2246not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2247extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2248(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2249These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2250@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2251@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2252@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2253@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2254[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2255
2256@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2257@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2258Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2259exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2260[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2261
2927aaca
NC
2262@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2263@item --exclude-all-symbols
2264Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2265[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2266
252b5132
RH
2267@kindex --file-alignment
2268@item --file-alignment
2269Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2270file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2271512.
bb10df36 2272[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2273
2274@cindex heap size
2275@kindex --heap
2276@item --heap @var{reserve}
2277@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2278Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2279to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2280committed.
bb10df36 2281[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2282
2283@cindex image base
2284@kindex --image-base
2285@item --image-base @var{value}
2286Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2287the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2288is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2289your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2290other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2291for dlls.
bb10df36 2292[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --kill-at
2295@item --kill-at
2296If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2297symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2298[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2299
26d2d8a2
BF
2300@kindex --large-address-aware
2301@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2302If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2303header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2304greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2305or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2306section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2307[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2308
252b5132
RH
2309@kindex --major-image-version
2310@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2311Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@kindex --major-os-version
2315@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2316Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2318
2319@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2320@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2321Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2322[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2323
2324@kindex --minor-image-version
2325@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2326Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2327[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2328
2329@kindex --minor-os-version
2330@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2331Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2332[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2333
2334@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2335@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2336Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2337[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2338
2339@cindex DEF files, creating
2340@cindex DLLs, creating
2341@kindex --output-def
2342@item --output-def @var{file}
2343The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2344file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2345(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2346library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2347automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2349
b044cda1
CW
2350@cindex DLLs, creating
2351@kindex --out-implib
2352@item --out-implib @var{file}
2353The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2354import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2355import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2356may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2357makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2358creation step.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2360
2361@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2362@item --enable-auto-image-base
2363Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2364using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2365from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2366collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2367avoided.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2369
2370@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2371@item --disable-auto-image-base
2372Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2373user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2374default.
bb10df36 2375[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2376
2377@cindex DLLs, linking to
2378@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2379@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2380When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2381search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2382@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2383between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2384uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2385@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2386[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2387
2388@kindex --enable-auto-import
2389@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2390Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2391DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2392building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2393'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2394to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2395specification published by Microsoft.
2396
e2a83dd0
NC
2397Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2398data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2399placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2400around a problem with consts that is described here:
2401http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2402
4d8907ac
DS
2403Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2404see this message:
0d888aac 2405
ece2d90e 2406"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2407documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2408
ece2d90e
NC
2409This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2410ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2411allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2412fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2413constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2414multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2415this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2416of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2417the warning, and exit.
2418
2419There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2420data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2421
2fa9fc65
NC
2422One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2423of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2424this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2425
c0065db7
RM
2426A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2427that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2428there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2429a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2430
2431@example
2432extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2433extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2434 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2435@end example
2436
2437or
2438
2439@example
2440extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2441extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2442 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2443@end example
2444
c0065db7 2445For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2446is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2447
2448@example
2449extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2450extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2451 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2452@end example
2453
c406afaf
NC
2454or
2455
2456@example
2457extern long long extern_ll;
2458extern_ll -->
2459 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2460@end example
2461
2fa9fc65 2462A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2463'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2464@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2465requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2466building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2467merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2468between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2469constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2470
2471Original:
2472@example
2473--foo.h
2474extern int arr[];
2475--foo.c
2476#include "foo.h"
2477void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2478 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2479@}
2480@end example
2481
2482Solution 1:
2483@example
2484--foo.h
2485extern int arr[];
2486--foo.c
2487#include "foo.h"
2488void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2489 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2490 volatile int *parr = arr;
2491 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2492@}
2493@end example
2494
2495Solution 2:
2496@example
2497--foo.h
2498/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2499#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2500 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2501#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2502#else
2503#define FOO_IMPORT
2504#endif
2505extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2506--foo.c
2507#include "foo.h"
2508void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2509 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2510@}
2511@end example
2512
c0065db7 2513A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2514library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2515for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2516functions).
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2518
2519@kindex --disable-auto-import
2520@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2521Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2522@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2523[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2524
2fa9fc65
NC
2525@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2526@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2528that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2529a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2530environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2532
2533@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2534@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2536DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2537[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2538
b044cda1
CW
2539@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2540@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2542[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2543
252b5132
RH
2544@kindex --section-alignment
2545@item --section-alignment
2546Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2547addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2548[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2549
2550@cindex stack size
2551@kindex --stack
2552@item --stack @var{reserve}
2553@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2554Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2555to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2556committed.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2558
2559@kindex --subsystem
2560@item --subsystem @var{which}
2561@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2563Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2564legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2565@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2566the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2567@var{which}.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2569
2f563b51
DK
2570The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2571of the PE file header:
2572[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2573
2574@kindex --dynamicbase
2575@item --dynamicbase
2576The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2577randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2578Vista for i386 PE targets.
2579
2580@kindex --forceinteg
2581@item --forceinteg
2582Code integrity checks are enforced.
2583
2584@kindex --nxcompat
2585@item --nxcompat
2586The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2587This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2588
2589@kindex --no-isolation
2590@item --no-isolation
2591Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2592
2593@kindex --no-seh
2594@item --no-seh
2595The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2596this image.
2597
2598@kindex --no-bind
2599@item --no-bind
2600Do not bind this image.
2601
2602@kindex --wdmdriver
2603@item --wdmdriver
2604The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2605
2606@kindex --tsaware
2607@item --tsaware
2608The image is Terminal Server aware.
2609
252b5132
RH
2610@end table
2611
0285c67d
NC
2612@c man end
2613
93fd0973
SC
2614@ifset M68HC11
2615@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2616
2617@c man begin OPTIONS
2618
2619The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2620memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2621
2622@table @gcctabopt
2623
2624@kindex --no-trampoline
2625@item --no-trampoline
2626This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2627is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2628instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2629
2630@kindex --bank-window
2631@item --bank-window @var{name}
2632This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2633the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2634The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2635paging and addresses within the memory window.
2636
2637@end table
2638
2639@c man end
2640@end ifset
2641
7fb9f789
NC
2642@ifset M68K
2643@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2644
2645@c man begin OPTIONS
2646
2647The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2648when linking for 68K targets.
2649
2650@table @gcctabopt
2651
2652@kindex --got
2653@item --got=@var{type}
2654This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2655@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2656@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2657Info entry for @file{ld}.
2658
2659@end table
2660
2661@c man end
2662@end ifset
2663
252b5132
RH
2664@ifset UsesEnvVars
2665@node Environment
2666@section Environment Variables
2667
0285c67d
NC
2668@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2669
560e09e9 2670You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2671@ifclear SingleFormat
2672@code{GNUTARGET},
2673@end ifclear
2674@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2675
36f63dca 2676@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2677@kindex GNUTARGET
2678@cindex default input format
2679@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2680use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2681of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2682@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2683of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2684attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2685this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2686there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2687object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2688BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2689in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2690@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex LDEMULATION
2693@cindex default emulation
2694@cindex emulation, default
2695@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2696@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2697behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2698available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2699the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2700variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2701linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2702
2703@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2704@cindex demangling, default
2705Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2706@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2707default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2708a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2709may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2710options.
2711
0285c67d
NC
2712@c man end
2713@end ifset
2714
252b5132
RH
2715@node Scripts
2716@chapter Linker Scripts
2717
2718@cindex scripts
2719@cindex linker scripts
2720@cindex command files
2721Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2722written in the linker command language.
2723
2724The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2725the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2726the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2727more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2728direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2729described below.
2730
2731The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2732yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2733linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2734to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2735such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2736
2737You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2738line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2739default linker script.
2740
2741You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2742to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2743Linker Scripts}.
2744
2745@menu
2746* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2747* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2748* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2749* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2750* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2751* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2752* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2753* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2754* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2755* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2756* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2757@end menu
2758
2759@node Basic Script Concepts
2760@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2761@cindex linker script concepts
2762We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2763describe the linker script language.
2764
2765The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2766file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2767@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2768The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2769purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2770among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2771section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2772in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2773
2774Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2775also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2776contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2777the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2778A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2779area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2780loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2781which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2782of debugging information.
2783
2784Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2785first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2786the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2787@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2788section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2789same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2790is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2791(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2792based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2793RAM address would be the VMA.
2794
2795You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2796program with the @samp{-h} option.
2797
2798Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2799@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2800has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2801information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2802will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2803static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2804referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2805
2806You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2807program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2808option.
2809
2810@node Script Format
2811@section Linker Script Format
2812@cindex linker script format
2813Linker scripts are text files.
2814
2815You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2816either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2817symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2818generally ignored.
2819
2820Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2821If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2822otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2823double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2824file name.
2825
2826You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2827@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2828to whitespace.
2829
2830@node Simple Example
2831@section Simple Linker Script Example
2832@cindex linker script example
2833@cindex example of linker script
2834Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2835
2836The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2837@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2838memory layout of the output file.
2839
2840The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2841describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2842code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2843@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2844Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2845your input files.
2846
2847For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28480x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2849linker script which will do that:
2850@smallexample
2851SECTIONS
2852@{
2853 . = 0x10000;
2854 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2855 . = 0x8000000;
2856 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2857 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2858@}
2859@end smallexample
2860
2861You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2862followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2863descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2864
252b5132
RH
2865The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2866sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2867counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2868other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2869current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2870incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2871@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2872
2873The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2874required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2875after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2876which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2877wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2878means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2879
2880Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2881@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2882@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2883
2884The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2885the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2886at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2887output section, the value of the location counter will be
2888@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2889effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2890immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2891
2892The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2893alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2894example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2895sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2896may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2897sections.
2898
2899That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2900
2901@node Simple Commands
2902@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2903@cindex linker script simple commands
2904In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2905
2906@menu
2907* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2908* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2909@ifclear SingleFormat
2910* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2911@end ifclear
2912
4a93e180 2913* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2914* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2915@end menu
2916
2917@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2918@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2919@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2920@cindex start of execution
2921@cindex first instruction
2922@cindex entry point
2923The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2924point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2925entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2926@smallexample
2927ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2928@end smallexample
2929
2930There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2931entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2932stopping when one of them succeeds:
2933@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2934@item
252b5132 2935the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2936@item
252b5132 2937the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2938@item
3ab904c4
NC
2939the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2940targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2941check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2942@item
252b5132 2943the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2944@item
252b5132
RH
2945The address @code{0}.
2946@end itemize
2947
2948@node File Commands
36f63dca 2949@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2950@cindex linker script file commands
2951Several linker script commands deal with files.
2952
2953@table @code
2954@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2955@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@cindex including a linker script
2957Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2958be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2959with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
296010 levels deep.
2961
4006703d
NS
2962You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2963@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2964
252b5132
RH
2965@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2966@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2967@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2968@cindex input files in linker scripts
2969@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2970@cindex linker script input object files
2971The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2972in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2973
2974For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2975a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2976then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2977
2978In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2979script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2980
e3f2db7f
AO
2981In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2982with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2983located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2984for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2985open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2986linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2987description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2988
ff5dcc92 2989If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2990name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2991@samp{-l}.
2992
2993When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2994files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2995script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2996
2997@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2998@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2999@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3000@cindex grouping input files
3001The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3002files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3003new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3004in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3005
b717d30e
JJ
3006@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3007@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3008@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3009This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3010commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3011as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3012with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3013when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3014@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3015and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3016setting afterwards.
3017
252b5132
RH
3018@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3019@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3020@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3021The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3022@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3023@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3024Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3025precedence.
3026
3027You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3028output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3029
3030@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3031@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@cindex library search path in linker script
3033@cindex archive search path in linker script
3034@cindex search path in linker script
3035The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3036@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3037@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3038on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3039are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3040the command line option are searched first.
3041
3042@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3043@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@cindex first input file
3045The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3046that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3047though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3048when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3049first file.
3050@end table
3051
3052@ifclear SingleFormat
3053@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3054@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3055A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3056
3057@table @code
3058@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3059@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3060@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3061@cindex output file format in linker script
3062The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3063output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3064exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3065(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3066line option takes precedence.
3067
3068You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3069formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3070This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3071desired endianness.
3072
3073If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3074will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3075output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3076used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3077
3078For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3079command:
3080@smallexample
3081OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3082@end smallexample
3083This says that the default format for the output file is
3084@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3085option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3086format.
3087
3088@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3089@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@cindex input file format in linker script
3091The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3092files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3093This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3094(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3095is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3096command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3097@end table
3098@end ifclear
3099
4a93e180
NC
3100@node REGION_ALIAS
3101@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3102@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3103@cindex region alias
3104@cindex region names
3105
3106Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3107@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3108
3109@smallexample
3110REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3111@end smallexample
3112
3113The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3114memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3115to memory regions. An example follows.
3116
3117Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3118memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3119that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3120non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3121access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3122read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3123sections:
3124
3125@itemize @bullet
3126@item
3127@code{.text} program code;
3128@item
3129@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3130@item
3131@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3132@item
3133@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3134@end itemize
3135
3136The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3137part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3138output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3139systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3140@code{C}:
3141@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3142@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3143@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3144@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3145@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3146@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3147@end multitable
3148The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3149loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3150the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3151the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3152
3153The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3154includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3155memory layout:
3156@smallexample
3157INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3158
3159SECTIONS
3160 @{
3161 .text :
3162 @{
3163 *(.text)
3164 @} > REGION_TEXT
3165 .rodata :
3166 @{
3167 *(.rodata)
3168 rodata_end = .;
3169 @} > REGION_RODATA
3170 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3171 @{
3172 data_start = .;
3173 *(.data)
3174 @} > REGION_DATA
3175 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3176 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3177 .bss :
3178 @{
3179 *(.bss)
3180 @} > REGION_BSS
3181 @}
3182@end smallexample
3183
3184Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3185regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3186variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3187@table @code
3188@item A
3189Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3190@smallexample
3191MEMORY
3192 @{
3193 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3194 @}
3195
3196REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3200@end smallexample
3201@item B
3202Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3203into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3204@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3205@smallexample
3206MEMORY
3207 @{
3208 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3209 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3210 @}
3211
3212REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3216@end smallexample
3217@item C
3218Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3219@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3220initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3221system start into the @code{RAM}.
3222@smallexample
3223MEMORY
3224 @{
3225 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3226 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3227 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 @}
3229
3230REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3234@end smallexample
3235@end table
3236
3237It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3238@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3239necessary:
3240@smallexample
3241#include <string.h>
3242
3243extern char data_start [];
3244extern char data_size [];
3245extern char data_load_start [];
3246
3247void copy_data(void)
3248@{
3249 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3250 @{
3251 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3252 @}
3253@}
3254@end smallexample
3255
252b5132 3256@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3257@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3258There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3259
3260@table @code
3261@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3262@kindex ASSERT
3263@cindex assertion in linker script
3264Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3265with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3266
3267@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3268@kindex EXTERN
3269@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3270Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3271symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3272modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3273each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3274command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3275
3276@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3277@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@cindex common allocation in linker script
3279This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3280to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3281output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3282
4818e05f
AM
3283@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3284@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@cindex common allocation in linker script
3286This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3287command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3288to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3289
53d25da6
AM
3290@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3291@kindex INSERT
3292@cindex insert user script into default script
3293This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3294augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3295inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3296@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3297default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3298sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3299linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3300insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3301linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3302default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3303of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3304to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3305is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3306
3307@smallexample
3308SECTIONS
3309@{
3310 OVERLAY :
3311 @{
3312 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3313 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3314 @}
3315@}
3316INSERT AFTER .text;
3317@end smallexample
3318
252b5132
RH
3319@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3320@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3321@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3322This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3323references among certain output sections.
3324
3325In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3326using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3327will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3328errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3329a function defined in the other section.
3330
3331The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3332@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3333an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3334@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3335names.
3336
3337@ifclear SingleFormat
3338@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3339@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@cindex machine architecture
3341@cindex architecture
3342Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3343of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3344architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3345the @samp{-f} option.
3346@end ifclear
3347@end table
3348
3349@node Assignments
3350@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3351@cindex assignment in scripts
3352@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3353@cindex variables, defining
3354You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3355the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3356
3357@menu
3358* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3359* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3360* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3361* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3362@end menu
3363
3364@node Simple Assignments
3365@subsection Simple Assignments
3366
3367You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3368
3369@table @code
3370@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3371@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3372@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3373@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3374@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3375@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3376@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3377@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3378@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3379@end table
3380
3381The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3382@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3383defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3384
3385The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3386may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3387
3388The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3389
3390Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3391
3392You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3393statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3394section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3395
3396The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3397expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3398
3399Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3400assignments may be used:
3401
3402@smallexample
3403floating_point = 0;
3404SECTIONS
3405@{
3406 .text :
3407 @{
3408 *(.text)
3409 _etext = .;
3410 @}
156e34dd 3411 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3412 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3413@}
3414@end smallexample
3415@noindent
3416In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3417zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3418the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3419defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3420upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3421
3422@node PROVIDE
3423@subsection PROVIDE
3424@cindex PROVIDE
3425In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3426only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3427the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3428@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3429@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3430@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3431@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3432@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3433
3434Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3435@smallexample
3436SECTIONS
3437@{
3438 .text :
3439 @{
3440 *(.text)
3441 _etext = .;
3442 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3443 @}
3444@}
3445@end smallexample
3446
3447In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3448underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3449the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3450underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3451If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3452linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3453
7af8e998
L
3454@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3455@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3456@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3457Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3458hidden and won't be exported.
3459
73ae6183
NC
3460@node Source Code Reference
3461@subsection Source Code Reference
3462
3463Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3464intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3465a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3466symbol that does not have a value.
3467
3468Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3469transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3470stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3471prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3472mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3473of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3474variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3475linker script variable might be referred to as:
3476
3477@smallexample
3478 extern int foo;
3479@end smallexample
3480
3481But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3482
3483@smallexample
3484 _foo = 1000;
3485@end smallexample
3486
3487In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3488transformation has taken place.
3489
3490When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3491things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3492in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3493second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3494table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3495contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3496value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3497
3498@smallexample
3499 int foo = 1000;
3500@end smallexample
3501
3502creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3503holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3504number 1000 is initially stored.
3505
3506When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3507first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3508memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3509So:
3510
3511@smallexample
3512 foo = 1;
3513@end smallexample
3514
3515looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3516associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3517address. Whereas:
3518
3519@smallexample
3520 int * a = & foo;
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3524and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3525the variable @samp{a}.
3526
3527Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3528the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3529an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3530
3531@smallexample
3532 foo = 1000;
3533@end smallexample
3534
3535creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3536the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3537address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3538linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3539access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3540
3541Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3542you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3543use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3544section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3545linker script contains these declarations:
3546
3547@smallexample
3548@group
3549 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3550 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3551 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3552@end group
3553@end smallexample
3554
3555Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3556
3557@smallexample
3558@group
3559 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3560
73ae6183
NC
3561 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3562@end group
3563@end smallexample
3564
3565Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3566
252b5132 3567@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3568@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3569@kindex SECTIONS
3570The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3571into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3572
3573The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3574@smallexample
3575SECTIONS
3576@{
3577 @var{sections-command}
3578 @var{sections-command}
3579 @dots{}
3580@}
3581@end smallexample
3582
3583Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3584
3585@itemize @bullet
3586@item
3587an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3588@item
3589a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3590@item
3591an output section description
3592@item
3593an overlay description
3594@end itemize
3595
3596The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3597@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3598those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3599understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3600the layout of the output file.
3601
3602Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3603below.
3604
3605If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3606linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3607section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3608input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3609example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3610in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3611
3612@menu
3613* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3614* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3615* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3616* Input Section:: Input section description
3617* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3618* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3619* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3620* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3621* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3622@end menu
3623
3624@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3625@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3626The full description of an output section looks like this:
3627@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3628@group
7e7d5768 3629@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3630 [AT(@var{lma})]
3631 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3632 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3633 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3634 @{
3635 @var{output-section-command}
3636 @var{output-section-command}
3637 @dots{}
562d3460 3638 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3639@end group
3640@end smallexample
3641
3642Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3643
3644The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3645name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3646The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3647
3648Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3649
3650@itemize @bullet
3651@item
3652a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3653@item
3654an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3655@item
3656data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3657@item
3658a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3659@end itemize
3660
3661@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3662@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3663@cindex name, section
3664@cindex section name
3665The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3666meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3667support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3668must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3669example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3670output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3671names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3672quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3673characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3674commas must be quoted.
3675
3676The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3677Discarding}.
3678
3679@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3680@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3681@cindex address, section
3682@cindex section address
3683The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3684address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3685is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3686
3687If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3688section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3689to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3690alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3691contained within the output section.
3692
3693The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3694
3695@itemize @bullet
3696@item
3697If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3698is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3699in that region.
3700
3701@item
3702If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3703regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3704section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3705be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3706
3707@item
3708If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3709the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3710counter.
3711@end itemize
3712
3713@noindent
3714For example:
3715
252b5132
RH
3716@smallexample
3717.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3718@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3719
252b5132
RH
3720@noindent
3721and
ea5cae92 3722
252b5132
RH
3723@smallexample
3724.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3725@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3726
252b5132
RH
3727@noindent
3728are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3729@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3730counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3731counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3732input sections.
252b5132
RH
3733
3734The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3735For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3736so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3737do something like this:
3738@smallexample
3739.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3740@end smallexample
3741@noindent
3742This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3743aligned upward to the specified value.
3744
3745Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3746location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3747sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3748
3749@node Input Section
36f63dca 3750@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3751@cindex input sections
3752@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3753The most common output section command is an input section description.
3754
3755The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3756You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3757in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3758map the input files into your memory layout.
3759
3760@menu
3761* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3762* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3763* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3764* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3765* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3766@end menu
3767
3768@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3769@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3770@cindex input section basics
3771An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3772by a list of section names in parentheses.
3773
3774The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3775describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3776
3777The most common input section description is to include all input
3778sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3779include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3780@smallexample
3781*(.text)
3782@end smallexample
3783@noindent
18625d54
CM
3784Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3785of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3786match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3787example:
252b5132 3788@smallexample
b4346c09 3789*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3790@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3791will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3792@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3793
3794There are two ways to include more than one section:
3795@smallexample
3796*(.text .rdata)
3797*(.text) *(.rdata)
3798@end smallexample
3799@noindent
3800The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3801@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3802first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3803they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3804@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3805@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3806
3807You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3808You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3809needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3810@smallexample
3811data.o(.data)
3812@end smallexample
3813
967928e9
AM
3814You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3815matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3816with no whitespace around the colon.
3817
3818@table @samp
3819@item archive:file
3820matches file within archive
3821@item archive:
3822matches the whole archive
3823@item :file
3824matches file but not one in an archive
3825@end table
3826
3827Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3828wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3829single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3830@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3831within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3832also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3833other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3834from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3835command.
3836
252b5132
RH
3837If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3838the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3839commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3840@smallexample
3841data.o
3842@end smallexample
3843
967928e9
AM
3844When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3845and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3846characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3847name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3848did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3849though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3850@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3851the archive search path.
3852
3853@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3854@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3855@cindex input section wildcards
3856@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3857@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3858@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3859In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3860name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3861
3862The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3863pattern for the file name.
3864
3865The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3866
3867@table @samp
3868@item *
3869matches any number of characters
3870@item ?
3871matches any single character
3872@item [@var{chars}]
3873matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3874character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3875@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3876@item \
3877quotes the following character
3878@end table
3879
3880When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3881will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3882Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3883exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3884@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3885a @samp{/} character.
3886
3887File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3888specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3889does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3890
3891If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3892appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3893will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3894sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3895@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3896@smallexample
3897.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3898.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3899@end smallexample
3900
bcaa7b3e 3901@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3902Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3903in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3904this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3905pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3906@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3907into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3908
bcaa7b3e
L
3909@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3910@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3911difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3912ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3913
02ecc8e9
L
3914@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3915@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3916difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3917ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3918encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3919
bcaa7b3e
L
3920@cindex SORT
3921@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3922
3923When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3924can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3925
3926@enumerate
3927@item
3928@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3929It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3930sections have the same name.
3931@item
3932@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3933It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3934sections have the same alignment.
3935@item
c0065db7 3936@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3937treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3938@item
3939@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3940is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3941@item
3942All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3943@end enumerate
3944
3945When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3946section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3947takes precedence over the command line option.
3948
3949If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3950command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3951treated as nested sorting command.
3952
3953@enumerate
3954@item
3955@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3956@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3957@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3958@item
3959@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3960@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3961@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3962@end enumerate
3963
3964If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3965command line option will be ignored.
3966
252b5132
RH
3967If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3968@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3969precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3970
3971This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3972files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3973sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3974The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3975with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3976linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3977@smallexample
3978@group
3979SECTIONS @{
3980 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3981 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3982 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3983 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3984@}
3985@end group
3986@end smallexample
3987
3988@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3989@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3990@cindex common symbol placement
3991@cindex uninitialized data placement
3992A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3993file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3994linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3995named @samp{COMMON}.
3996
3997You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3998other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3999particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4000input files are placed in another section.
4001
4002In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4003@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4004@smallexample
4005.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4006@end smallexample
4007
4008@cindex scommon section
4009@cindex small common symbols
4010Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4011example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4012symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4013different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4014the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4015symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4016to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4017locations.
4018
4019@cindex [COMMON]
4020You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4021notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4022@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4023
4024@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4025@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4026@cindex KEEP
4027@cindex garbage collection
4028When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4029it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4030This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4031with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4032@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4033
4034@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4035@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4036The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4037to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4038start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4039@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4040follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4041@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4042@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4043All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4044files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4045
4046@smallexample
4047@group
4048SECTIONS @{
4049 outputa 0x10000 :
4050 @{
4051 all.o
4052 foo.o (.input1)
4053 @}
36f63dca
NC
4054@end group
4055@group
252b5132
RH
4056 outputb :
4057 @{
4058 foo.o (.input2)
4059 foo1.o (.input1)
4060 @}
36f63dca
NC
4061@end group
4062@group
252b5132
RH
4063 outputc :
4064 @{
4065 *(.input1)
4066 *(.input2)
4067 @}
4068@}
4069@end group
a1ab1d2a 4070@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4071
4072@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4073@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4074@cindex data
4075@cindex section data
4076@cindex output section data
4077@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4078@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4079@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4080@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4081@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4082You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4083@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4084an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4085parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4086value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4087counter.
4088
4089The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4090store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4091bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4092stored.
4093
4094For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4095of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4096@smallexample
4097BYTE(1)
4098LONG(addr)
4099@end smallexample
4100
4101When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4102same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4103target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4104@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4105@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4106
4107If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4108which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4109When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4110true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4111endianness of the first input object file.
4112
36f63dca 4113Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4114between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4115@smallexample
4116SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4117@end smallexample
4118whereas this will work:
4119@smallexample
4120SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4121@end smallexample
4122
252b5132
RH
4123@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4124@cindex holes, filling
4125@cindex unspecified memory
4126You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4127current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4128otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4129gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4130with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4131necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4132point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4133than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4134different parts of an output section.
4135
4136This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4137value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4138@smallexample
563e308f 4139FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4140@end smallexample
4141
4142The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4143section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4144part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4145entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4146precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4147expression.
252b5132
RH
4148
4149@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4150@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4151There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4152commands.
4153
4154@table @code
4155@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4156@cindex input filename symbols
4157@cindex filename symbols
4158@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4159The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4160The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4161file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4162the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4163
4164This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4165normally used for any other object file format.
4166
4167@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4168@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4169@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4170@item CONSTRUCTORS
4171When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4172unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4173destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4174arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4175automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4176For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4177linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4178@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4179ignored for other object file formats.
4180
4181The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4182constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4183Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4184the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4185first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4186of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4187compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4188formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4189@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4190the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4191destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4192@code{exit}.
4193
4194For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4195arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4196addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4197and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4198linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4199runtime code expects to see.
4200
4201@smallexample
4202 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4203 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4204 *(.ctors)
4205 LONG(0)
4206 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4207 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4208 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4209 *(.dtors)
4210 LONG(0)
4211 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4212@end smallexample
4213
4214If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4215which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4216are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4217are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4218command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4219@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4220@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4221@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4222
4223Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4224and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4225need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4226scripts.
4227
4228@end table
4229
4230@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4231@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4232@cindex discarding sections
4233@cindex sections, discarding
4234@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4235The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4236for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4237be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4238@smallexample
49c13adb 4239.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4240@end smallexample
4241@noindent
4242will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4243@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4244sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4245space in an output section will also create the output section.
4246
a0976ea4 4247The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4248on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4249symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4250the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4251section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4252
4253@cindex /DISCARD/
4254The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4255input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4256section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4257
4258@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4259@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4260@cindex output section attributes
4261We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4262like this:
0c71d759 4263
252b5132 4264@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4265@group
7e7d5768 4266@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4267 [AT(@var{lma})]
4268 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4269 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4270 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4271 @{
4272 @var{output-section-command}
4273 @var{output-section-command}
4274 @dots{}
562d3460 4275 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4276@end group
4277@end smallexample
0c71d759 4278
252b5132
RH
4279We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4280@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4281remaining section attributes.
4282
a1ab1d2a 4283@menu
252b5132
RH
4284* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4285* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4286* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4287* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4288* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4289* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4290* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4291* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4292@end menu
4293
4294@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4295@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4296Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4297parentheses. The following types are defined:
4298
4299@table @code
4300@item NOLOAD
4301The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4302loaded into memory when the program is run.
4303@item DSECT
4304@itemx COPY
4305@itemx INFO
4306@itemx OVERLAY
4307These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4308rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4309marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4310section when the program is run.
4311@end table
4312
4313@kindex NOLOAD
4314@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4315@cindex loading, preventing
4316The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4317the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4318the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4319@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4320need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4321@smallexample
4322@group
4323SECTIONS @{
4324 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4325 @dots{}
4326@}
4327@end group
4328@end smallexample
4329
4330@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4331@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4332@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4333@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4334@cindex load address
4335@cindex section load address
4336Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4337@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4338@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4339specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4340address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4341
ea5cae92
NC
4342The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4343specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4344takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4345load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4346region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4347
4348If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4349section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4350load address:
4351
4352@itemize @bullet
4353@item
4354If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4355the LMA address as well.
4356
4357@item
4358If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4359
4360@item
4361Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4362with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4363section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4364VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4365the last section in the located region.
4366
4367@item
4368If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4369that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4370
4371@item
4372If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4373section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4374@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4375
4376@cindex ROM initialized data
4377@cindex initialized data in ROM
4378This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4379example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4380called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4381@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4382even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4383uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4384defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4385counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4386
4387@smallexample
4388@group
4389SECTIONS
4390 @{
4391 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4392 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4393 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4394 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4395 .bss 0x3000 :
4396 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4397@}
4398@end group
4399@end smallexample
4400
4401The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4402this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4403the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4404how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4405script.
4406
4407@smallexample
4408@group
4409extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4410char *src = &_etext;
4411char *dst = &_data;
4412
ea5cae92
NC
4413/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4414while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4415 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4416
ea5cae92 4417/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4418for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4419 *dst = 0;
4420@end group
4421@end smallexample
4422
bbf115d3
L
4423@node Forced Output Alignment
4424@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4425@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4426@cindex forcing output section alignment
4427@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4428You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4429
7e7d5768
AM
4430@node Forced Input Alignment
4431@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4432@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4433@cindex forcing input section alignment
4434@cindex input section alignment
4435You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4436SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4437sections, whether larger or smaller.
4438
0c71d759
NC
4439@node Output Section Constraint
4440@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4441@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4442@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4443@cindex constraints on output sections
4444You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4445of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4446read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4447@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4448
252b5132 4449@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4450@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4451@kindex >@var{region}
4452@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4453@cindex memory regions and sections
4454You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4455using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4456
4457Here is a simple example:
4458@smallexample
4459@group
4460MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4461SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4462@end group
4463@end smallexample
4464
4465@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4466@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4467@kindex :@var{phdr}
4468@cindex section, assigning to program header
4469@cindex program headers and sections
4470You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4471using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4472one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4473assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4474@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4475linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4476
4477Here is a simple example:
4478@smallexample
4479@group
4480PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4481SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4482@end group
4483@end smallexample
4484
4485@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4486@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4487@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4488@cindex section fill pattern
4489@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4490You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4491@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4492(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4493within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4494alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4495necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4496of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4497an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4498fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4499other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4500pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4501expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4502
4503You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4504output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4505
4506Here is a simple example:
4507@smallexample
4508@group
563e308f 4509SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4510@end group
4511@end smallexample
4512
4513@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4514@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4515@kindex OVERLAY
4516@cindex overlays
4517An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4518are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4519the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4520copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4521required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4522can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4523than another.
4524
4525Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4526@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4527output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4528command is as follows:
4529@smallexample
4530@group
4531OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4532 @{
4533 @var{secname1}
4534 @{
4535 @var{output-section-command}
4536 @var{output-section-command}
4537 @dots{}
4538 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4539 @var{secname2}
4540 @{
4541 @var{output-section-command}
4542 @var{output-section-command}
4543 @dots{}
4544 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4545 @dots{}
4546 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4547@end group
4548@end smallexample
4549
4550Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4551section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4552section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4553those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4554except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4555sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4556
4557The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4558addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4559memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4560whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4561and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4562and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4563
4564If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4565among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4566all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4567section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4568NOCROSSREFS}.
4569
4570For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4571provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4572defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4573@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4574the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4575within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4576symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4577
4578At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4579the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4580
4581Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4582@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4583@smallexample
4584@group
4585 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4586 @{
4587 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4588 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4589 @}
4590@end group
4591@end smallexample
4592@noindent
4593This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4594address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4595@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4596following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4597@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4598@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4599
4600C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4601like the following.
4602
4603@smallexample
4604@group
4605 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4606 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4607 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4608@end group
4609@end smallexample
4610
4611Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4612everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4613example could have been written identically as follows.
4614
4615@smallexample
4616@group
4617 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4618 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4619 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4620 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4621 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4622 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4623 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4624@end group
4625@end smallexample
4626
4627@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4628@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4629@kindex MEMORY
4630@cindex memory regions
4631@cindex regions of memory
4632@cindex allocating memory
4633@cindex discontinuous memory
4634The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4635memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4636
4637The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4638memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4639may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4640can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4641set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4642regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4643around to fit into the available regions.
4644
4645A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4646command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4647you wish. The syntax is:
4648@smallexample
4649@group
a1ab1d2a 4650MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4651 @{
4652 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4653 @dots{}
4654 @}
4655@end group
4656@end smallexample
4657
4658The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4659region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4660Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4661with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4662must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4663add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4664command.
252b5132
RH
4665
4666@cindex memory region attributes
4667The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4668whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4669not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4670@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4671section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4672the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4673them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4674
4675The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4676@table @samp
4677@item R
4678Read-only section
4679@item W
4680Read/write section
4681@item X
4682Executable section
4683@item A
4684Allocatable section
4685@item I
4686Initialized section
4687@item L
4688Same as @samp{I}
4689@item !
c09e9a8c 4690Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4691@end table
4692
4693If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4694@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4695attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4696in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4697attributes.
4698
4699@kindex ORIGIN =
4700@kindex o =
4701@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4702The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4703the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4704cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4705abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4706@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4707
4708@kindex LENGTH =
4709@kindex len =
4710@kindex l =
4711The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4712region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4713be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4714@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4715
4716In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4717available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4718and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4719linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4720is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4721or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4722explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4723region.
4724
4725@smallexample
4726@group
a1ab1d2a 4727MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4728 @{
4729 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4730 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4731 @}
4732@end group
4733@end smallexample
4734
4735Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4736specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4737@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4738a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4739output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4740was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4741the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4742output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4743region, the linker will issue an error message.
4744
3ec57632 4745It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4746expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4747@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4748
4749@smallexample
4750@group
c0065db7 4751 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4752@end group
4753@end smallexample
4754
252b5132
RH
4755@node PHDRS
4756@section PHDRS Command
4757@kindex PHDRS
4758@cindex program headers
4759@cindex ELF program headers
4760@cindex program segments
4761@cindex segments, ELF
4762The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4763@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4764loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4765program with the @samp{-p} option.
4766
4767When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4768reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4769program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4770This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4771interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4772
4773The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4774in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4775precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4776the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4777not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4778
4779The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4780generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4781ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4782
4783This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4784@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4785
4786@smallexample
4787@group
4788PHDRS
4789@{
4790 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4791 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4792@}
4793@end group
4794@end smallexample
4795
4796The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4797of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4798header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4799with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4800must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4801is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4802
4803Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4804system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4805specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4806sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4807attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4808Section Phdr}.
4809
4810It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4811merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4812repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4813contain the section.
4814
4815If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4816then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4817not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4818convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4819placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4820default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4821segment at all.
4822
4823@kindex FILEHDR
4824@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4825You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4826the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4827The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4828file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4829include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4830segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4831these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4832
4833The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4834value of the keyword.
4835
4836@table @asis
4837@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4838Indicates an unused program header.
4839
4840@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4841Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4842the file.
4843
4844@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4845Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4846
4847@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4848Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4849found.
4850
4851@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4852Indicates a segment holding note information.
4853
4854@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4855A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4856ABI.
4857
4858@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4859Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4860
4861@item @var{expression}
4862An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4863be used for types not defined above.
4864@end table
4865
4866You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4867in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4868@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4869Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4870output section attribute.
4871
4872The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4873which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4874explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4875an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4876header.
4877
4878Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4879headers used on a native ELF system.
4880
4881@example
4882@group
4883PHDRS
4884@{
4885 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4886 interp PT_INTERP ;
4887 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4888 data PT_LOAD ;
4889 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4890@}
4891
4892SECTIONS
4893@{
4894 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4895 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4896 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4897 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4898 @dots{}
4899 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4900 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4901 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4902 @dots{}
4903@}
4904@end group
4905@end example
4906
4907@node VERSION
4908@section VERSION Command
4909@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4910@cindex symbol versions
4911@cindex version script
4912@cindex versions of symbols
4913The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4914only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4915symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4916a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4917shared library.
4918
4919You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4920you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4921also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4922
4923The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4924@smallexample
4925VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4926@end smallexample
4927
4928The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4929Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4930version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4931version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4932version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4933scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4934library.
4935
4936The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4937examples.
4938
4939@smallexample
4940VERS_1.1 @{
4941 global:
4942 foo1;
4943 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4944 old*;
4945 original*;
4946 new*;
252b5132
RH
4947@};
4948
4949VERS_1.2 @{
4950 foo2;
4951@} VERS_1.1;
4952
4953VERS_2.0 @{
4954 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4955 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4956 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4957 "f(int, double)";
4958 @};
252b5132
RH
4959@} VERS_1.2;
4960@end smallexample
4961
4962This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4963version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4964The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4965a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4966of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4967symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4968is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4969in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4970However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4971name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4972
4973Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4974depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4975to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4976
4977Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4978depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4979and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4980
4981When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4982specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4983unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4984unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4985somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4986wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4987wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4988set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4989ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4990
4991The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4992they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4993could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4994However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4995
0f6bf451 4996Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4997in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4998symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4999won't.
5000
5001@smallexample
7c9c73be 5002@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5003@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5004
252b5132
RH
5005When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5006symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5007requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5008shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5009loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5010linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5011application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5012way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5013all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5014search for each symbol reference.
5015
5016The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5017doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5018that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5019functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5020the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5021required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5022that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5023versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5024the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5025
5026There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5027first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5028source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5029script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5030maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5031@smallexample
5032__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5033@end smallexample
5034@noindent
5035in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5036be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5037The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5038@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5039takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5040
5041The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5042function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5043an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5044version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5045linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5046
5047To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5048source file. Here is an example:
5049
5050@smallexample
5051__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5052__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5053__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5054__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5055@end smallexample
5056
5057In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5058unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5059example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5060@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5061
5062When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5063some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5064this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5065@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5066declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5067you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5068
5069If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5070within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5071(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5072specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5073
cb840a31
L
5074You can also specify the language in the version script:
5075
5076@smallexample
5077VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5078@end smallexample
5079
c0065db7 5080The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5081The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5082demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5083patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5084@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5085
86043bbb
MM
5086Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5087described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5088or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5089the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5090whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5091cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5092might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5093should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5094expect when you upgrade.
5095
252b5132
RH
5096@node Expressions
5097@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5098@cindex expressions
5099@cindex arithmetic
5100The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5101that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5102expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5103host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5104
5105You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5106
5107The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5108expressions.
5109
5110@menu
5111* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5112* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5113* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5114* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5115* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5116* Operators:: Operators
5117* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5118* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5119* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5120@end menu
5121
5122@node Constants
5123@subsection Constants
5124@cindex integer notation
5125@cindex constants in linker scripts
5126All constants are integers.
5127
5128As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5129octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5130hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5131@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5132@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5133value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5134
5135@cindex scaled integers
5136@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5137@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5138@cindex suffixes for integers
5139@cindex integer suffixes
5140In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5141constant by
5142@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5143@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5144@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5145@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5146@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5147@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5148@tex
5149${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5150@end tex
5151@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5152respectively. For example, the following
5153all refer to the same quantity:
5154
252b5132 5155@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5156_fourk_1 = 4K;
5157_fourk_2 = 4096;
5158_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5159_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5160@end smallexample
5161
8a308ae8
NC
5162Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5163conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5164
0c71d759
NC
5165@node Symbolic Constants
5166@subsection Symbolic Constants
5167@cindex symbolic constants
5168@kindex CONSTANT
5169It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5170the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5171
5172@table @code
5173@item MAXPAGESIZE
5174@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5175The target's maximum page size.
5176
5177@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5178@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5179The target's default page size.
5180@end table
5181
5182So for example:
5183
5184@smallexample
5185 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5186@end smallexample
5187
5188will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5189supported by the target.
5190
252b5132
RH
5191@node Symbols
5192@subsection Symbol Names
5193@cindex symbol names
5194@cindex names
5195@cindex quoted symbol names
5196@kindex "
5197Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5198and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5199Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5200specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5201keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5202@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5203"SECTION" = 9;
5204"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5205@end smallexample
5206
5207Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5208to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5209whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5210
ecca9871
L
5211@node Orphan Sections
5212@subsection Orphan Sections
5213@cindex orphan
5214Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5215are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5216script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5217output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5218placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5219attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5220same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5221If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5222at the end of the file.
5223
5224For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5225well as section flag.
5226
41911f68 5227If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5228the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5229__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5230section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5231orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5232representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5233character.
5234
252b5132
RH
5235@node Location Counter
5236@subsection The Location Counter
5237@kindex .
5238@cindex dot
5239@cindex location counter
5240@cindex current output location
5241The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5242current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5243location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5244within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5245anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5246
5247@cindex holes
5248Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5249moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5250location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5251and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5252doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5253
5254@smallexample
5255SECTIONS
5256@{
5257 output :
5258 @{
5259 file1(.text)
5260 . = . + 1000;
5261 file2(.text)
5262 . += 1000;
5263 file3(.text)
563e308f 5264 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5265@}
5266@end smallexample
5267@noindent
5268In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5269located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5270followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5271@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5272@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5273specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5274
5c6bbab8
NC
5275@cindex dot inside sections
5276Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5277current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5278statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5279absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5280however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5281not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5282
5283@smallexample
5284SECTIONS
5285@{
5286 . = 0x100
5287 .text: @{
5288 *(.text)
5289 . = 0x200
5290 @}
5291 . = 0x500
5292 .data: @{
5293 *(.data)
5294 . += 0x600
5295 @}
5296@}
5297@end smallexample
5298
5299The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5300and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5301the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5302much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5303move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5304and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5305the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5306the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5307
b5666f2f
AM
5308@cindex dot outside sections
5309Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5310output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5311needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5312
5313@smallexample
5314SECTIONS
5315@{
5316 start_of_text = . ;
5317 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5318 end_of_text = . ;
5319
5320 start_of_data = . ;
5321 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5322 end_of_data = . ;
5323@}
5324@end smallexample
5325
5326If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5327not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5328between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5329should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5330blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5331the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5332sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5333statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5334special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5335place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5336as follows:
5337
5338@smallexample
5339SECTIONS
5340@{
5341 start_of_text = . ;
5342 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5343 end_of_text = . ;
5344
5345 start_of_data = . ;
5346 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5347 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5348 end_of_data = . ;
5349@}
5350@end smallexample
5351
5352This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5353@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5354placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5355assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5356a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5357section. So you could write:
5358
5359@smallexample
5360SECTIONS
5361@{
5362 start_of_text = . ;
5363 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5364 end_of_text = . ;
5365
5366 . = . ;
5367 start_of_data = . ;
5368 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5369 end_of_data = . ;
5370@}
5371@end smallexample
5372
5373Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5374@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5375
252b5132
RH
5376@need 2000
5377@node Operators
5378@subsection Operators
5379@cindex operators for arithmetic
5380@cindex arithmetic operators
5381@cindex precedence in expressions
5382The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5383the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5384@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5385@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5386@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5387@smallexample
5388precedence associativity Operators Notes
5389(highest)
53901 left ! - ~ (1)
53912 left * / %
53923 left + -
53934 left >> <<
53945 left == != > < <= >=
53956 left &
53967 left |
53978 left &&
53989 left ||
539910 right ? :
540011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5401(lowest)
5402@end smallexample
5403Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5404(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5405(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5406@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5407@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5408@tex
5409\vskip \baselineskip
5410%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5411\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5412\hrule
5413\halign
5414{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5415height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5416&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5417height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5418\noalign{\hrule}
5419height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5420&highest&&&&&\cr
5421% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5422&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5423&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5424&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5425&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5426&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5427&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5428&7&&left&&|&\cr
5429&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5430&9&&left&&||&\cr
5431&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5432&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5433&lowest&&&&&\cr
5434height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5435\hrule}
5436@end tex
5437@iftex
5438{
5439@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5440@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5441@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5442}
5443@end iftex
5444@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5445
5446@node Evaluation
5447@subsection Evaluation
5448@cindex lazy evaluation
5449@cindex expression evaluation order
5450The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5451an expression when absolutely necessary.
5452
5453The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5454address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5455regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5456as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5457
5458However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5459until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5460other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5461for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5462
5463The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5464assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5465allocation.
5466
5467Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5468@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5469
5470If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5471available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5472following
5473@smallexample
5474@group
5475SECTIONS
5476 @{
a1ab1d2a 5477 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5478 @{ *(.text) @}
5479 @}
5480@end group
5481@end smallexample
5482@noindent
5483will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5484address}.
5485
5486@node Expression Section
5487@subsection The Section of an Expression
5488@cindex expression sections
5489@cindex absolute expressions
5490@cindex relative expressions
5491@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5492@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5493@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5494Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5495relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5496using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5497value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5498symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5499operations.
5500
abf4be64
AM
5501Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5502section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5503address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5504@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5505functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
7542af2a
AM
5506
5507When the linker evaluates an expression, the result depends on where
5508the expression is located in a linker script. Expressions appearing
5509outside an output section definitions are evaluated with all terms
5510first being converted to absolute addresses before applying operators,
5511and evaluate to an absolute address result. Expressions appearing
5512inside an output section definition are evaluated with more complex
5513rules, but the aim is to treat terms as relative addresses and produce
5514a relative address result. In particular, an assignment of a number
5515to a symbol results in a symbol relative to the output section with an
5516offset given by the number. So, in the following simple example,
252b5132 5517
7542af2a
AM
5518@smallexample
5519@group
5520SECTIONS
5521 @{
5522 . = 0x100;
5523 __executable_start = 0x100;
5524 .data :
5525 @{
5526 . = 0x10;
5527 __data_start = 0x10;
5528 *(.data)
5529 @}
5530 @dots{}
5531 @}
5532@end group
5533@end smallexample
252b5132 5534
7542af2a
AM
5535both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5536address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5537@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5538section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5539
7542af2a
AM
5540For expressions appearing inside an output section definition
5541involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute addresses, ld
5542follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5543
5544@itemize @bullet
5545@item
5546Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5547relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5548and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5549@item
5550Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5551or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5552same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5553address before applying the operator.
5554@end itemize
5555
5556The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5557
5558@itemize @bullet
5559@item
5560An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5561@item
5562The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5563@item
5564The result of other operations on relative addresses (after above
5565conversions) is a relative address in the same section as the operand(s).
5566@item
5567The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5568conversions) is an absolute address.
5569@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5570
5571You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5572to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5573create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5574section @samp{.data}:
5575@smallexample
5576SECTIONS
5577 @{
5578 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5579 @}
5580@end smallexample
5581@noindent
5582If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5583@samp{.data} section.
5584
7542af2a
AM
5585Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5586particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5587
252b5132
RH
5588@node Builtin Functions
5589@subsection Builtin Functions
5590@cindex functions in expressions
5591The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5592use in linker script expressions.
5593
5594@table @code
5595@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5596@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5597@cindex expression, absolute
5598Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5599of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5600value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5601normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5602
5603@item ADDR(@var{section})
5604@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5605@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5606Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5607script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5608the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5609@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5610@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5611the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5612@smallexample
5613@group
5614SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5615 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5616 @{
252b5132
RH
5617 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5618 @dots{}
5619 @}
5620 .output :
5621 @{
5622 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5623 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5624 @}
5625@dots{} @}
5626@end group
5627@end smallexample
5628
876f4090
NS
5629@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5630@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5631@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5632@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5633@cindex round up location counter
5634@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5635@cindex round up expression
5636@cindex align expression
5637Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5638to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5639doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5640arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5641expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5642equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5643
5644Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5645next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5646variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5647input sections:
252b5132
RH
5648@smallexample
5649@group
5650SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5651 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5652 *(.data)
5653 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5654 @}
5655@dots{} @}
5656@end group
5657@end smallexample
5658@noindent
5659The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5660a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5661a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5662of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5663
5664The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5665
362c1d1a
NS
5666@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5667@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5668@cindex section alignment
5669Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5670been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5671evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5672the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5673value in that section.
5674@smallexample
5675@group
5676SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5677 .output @{
5678 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5679 @dots{}
5680 @}
5681@dots{} @}
5682@end group
5683@end smallexample
5684
252b5132
RH
5685@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5686@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5687This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5688scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5689section.
5690
2d20f7bf
JJ
5691@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5692@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5693This is equivalent to either
5694@smallexample
5695(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5696@end smallexample
5697or
5698@smallexample
5699(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5700@end smallexample
5701@noindent
5702depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5703for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5704@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5705If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5706memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5707bytes in the on-disk file.
5708
5709This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5710any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5711@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5712be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5713working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5714
5715@noindent
5716Example:
5717@smallexample
5718 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5719@end smallexample
5720
5721@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5722@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5723This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5724evaluation purposes.
5725
5726@smallexample
5727 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5728@end smallexample
5729
a4f5ad88
JJ
5730@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5731@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5732This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5733@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5734When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5735does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5736@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5737boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5738it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5739@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5740
5741@smallexample
5742 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5743@end smallexample
5744
252b5132
RH
5745@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5746@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5747@cindex symbol defaults
5748Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5749defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5750return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5751default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5752shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5753the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5754existed, its value is preserved:
5755
5756@smallexample
5757@group
5758SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5759 .text : @{
5760 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5761 @dots{}
5762 @}
5763 @dots{}
5764@}
5765@end group
5766@end smallexample
5767
3ec57632
NC
5768@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5769@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5770Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5771
252b5132
RH
5772@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5773@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5774@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5775Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5776Section LMA}).
5777
5778@kindex MAX
5779@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5780Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5781
5782@kindex MIN
5783@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5784Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5785
5786@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5787@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5788@cindex unallocated address, next
5789Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5790This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5791use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5792output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5793
3ec57632
NC
5794@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5795@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5796Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5797
ba916c8a
MM
5798@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5799@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5800Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5801value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5802option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5803@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5804be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5805``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5806name.
5807
252b5132
RH
5808@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5809@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5810@cindex section size
5811Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5812been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5813evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5814@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5815@smallexample
5816@group
5817SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5818 .output @{
5819 .start = . ;
5820 @dots{}
5821 .end = . ;
5822 @}
5823 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5824 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5825@dots{} @}
5826@end group
5827@end smallexample
5828
5829@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5830@itemx sizeof_headers
5831@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5832@cindex header size
5833Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5834information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5835this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5836choose, to facilitate paging.
5837
5838@cindex not enough room for program headers
5839@cindex program headers, not enough room
5840When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5841@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5842number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5843addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5844additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5845room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5846the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5847script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5848you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5849command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5850@end table
5851
5852@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5853@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5854@cindex implicit linker scripts
5855If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5856an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5857linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5858linker will report an error.
5859
5860An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5861
5862Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5863assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5864commands.
5865
5866Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5867at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5868read. This can affect archive searching.
5869
5870@ifset GENERIC
5871@node Machine Dependent
5872@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5873
5874@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5875@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5876sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5877functionality are not listed.
5878
5879@menu
36f63dca
NC
5880@ifset H8300
5881* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5882@end ifset
5883@ifset I960
5884* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5885@end ifset
5886@ifset ARM
5887* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5888@end ifset
5889@ifset HPPA
5890* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5891@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5892@ifset M68K
5893* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5894@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5895@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5896* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5897@end ifset
2469cfa2 5898@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5899* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5900@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5901@ifset M68HC11
5902* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5903@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5904@ifset POWERPC
5905* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5906@end ifset
5907@ifset POWERPC64
5908* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5909@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5910@ifset SPU
5911* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5912@end ifset
74459f0e 5913@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5914* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5915@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5916@ifset WIN32
5917* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5918@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5919@ifset XTENSA
5920* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5921@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5922@end menu
5923@end ifset
5924
252b5132
RH
5925@ifset H8300
5926@ifclear GENERIC
5927@raisesections
5928@end ifclear
5929
5930@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5931@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5932
5933@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5934For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5935you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5936
5937@table @emph
5938@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5939@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5940@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5941targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5942program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5943respectively.
5944
5945@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5946@item synthesizing instructions
5947@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5948@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5949sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5950page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5951(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5952@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5953top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5954
5955@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5956@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5957biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5958which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5959page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5960(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5961@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5962the top page of memory).
5963
5964@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5965@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
596632 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5967changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5968(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5969@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5970the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5971@end table
5972
5973@ifclear GENERIC
5974@lowersections
5975@end ifclear
5976@end ifset
5977
36f63dca 5978@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5979@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5980@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5981@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5982@node Renesas
5983@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5984
c2dcd04e
NC
5985@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5986H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5987options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5988@end ifset
5989@end ifclear
5990
5991@ifset I960
5992@ifclear GENERIC
5993@raisesections
5994@end ifclear
5995
5996@node i960
5997@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5998
5999@cindex i960 support
6000
6001You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6002specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6003family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6004incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6005linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6006libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6007search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6008
6009For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6010well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6011paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6012the names
6013
6014@smallexample
6015@group
6016try
6017libtry.a
6018tryca
6019libtryca.a
6020@end group
6021@end smallexample
6022
6023@noindent
6024The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6025two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6026
6027You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6028the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6029use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6030specifies a library.
6031
6032@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6033@cindex relaxing on i960
6034@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6035you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6036@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6037them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6038instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6039instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6040target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6041not itself call any subroutines).
6042
48229727
JB
6043@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6044@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6045@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6046The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6047
6048The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6049
85fdf906
AH
6050@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6051@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6052The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6053
36f63dca
NC
6054@ifclear GENERIC
6055@lowersections
6056@end ifclear
6057@end ifset
6058
6059@ifset ARM
6060@ifclear GENERIC
6061@raisesections
6062@end ifclear
6063
93fd0973
SC
6064@ifset M68HC11
6065@ifclear GENERIC
6066@raisesections
6067@end ifclear
6068
6069@node M68HC11/68HC12
6070@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6071
6072@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6073
6074@subsection Linker Relaxation
6075
6076For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6077optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6078
6079@table @emph
6080@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6081@item relaxing address modes
6082@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6083targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6084program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6085respectively.
6086
6087@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6088transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6089page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6090
6091@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6092When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6093of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6094addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6095@code{bset} instructions.
6096
6097@end table
6098
6099@subsection Trampoline Generation
6100
6101@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6102@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6103For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6104call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6105will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6106trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6107case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6108point to the function trampoline.
6109
6110@ifclear GENERIC
6111@lowersections
6112@end ifclear
6113@end ifset
6114
36f63dca 6115@node ARM
3674e28a 6116@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6117
6118@cindex ARM interworking support
6119@kindex --support-old-code
6120For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6121between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6122been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6123line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6124libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6125option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6126given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6127which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6128the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6129non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6130
6131@cindex thumb entry point
6132@cindex entry point, thumb
6133@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6134The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6135@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6136But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6137branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6138executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6139
ce11ba6c
KT
6140@cindex PE import table prefixing
6141@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6142The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6143the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6144elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6145import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6146
e489d0ae
PB
6147@cindex BE8
6148@kindex --be8
6149The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6150executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6151The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6152
3674e28a
PB
6153@cindex TARGET1
6154@kindex --target1-rel
6155@kindex --target1-abs
6156The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6157@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6158or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6159and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6160
6161@cindex TARGET2
6162@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6163The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6164@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6165meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6166@table @samp
6167@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6168@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6169@item abs
6170@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6171@item got-rel
6172@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6173@end table
6174
319850b4
JB
6175@cindex FIX_V4BX
6176@kindex --fix-v4bx
6177The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6178specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6179interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6180also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6181
6182In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6183linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6184@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6185
6186In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6187relocations are ignored.
6188
845b51d6
PB
6189@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6190@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6191Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6192relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6193
6194@smallexample
6195TST rM, #1
6196MOVEQ PC, rM
6197BX Rn
6198@end smallexample
6199
6200This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6201and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6202condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6203
33bfe774
JB
6204@cindex USE_BLX
6205@kindex --use-blx
6206The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6207BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6208situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6209code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6210each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6211
6212This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6213specify it if you are using that target.
6214
c6dd86c6
JB
6215@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6216@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6217The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6218bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6219instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6220to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6221the support code can read the intended values.
6222
6223The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6224intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6225and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6226intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6227full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6228you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6229
6230If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6231enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6232@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6233mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6234vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6235@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6236
6237If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6238potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6239such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6240first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6241instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6242the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6243are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6244
bf21ed78
MS
6245@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6246@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6247The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6248warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6249enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6250linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6251using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6252not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6253
6254@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6255@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6256The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6257warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6258@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6259linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6260using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6261
726150b7
NC
6262@cindex PIC_VENEER
6263@kindex --pic-veneer
6264The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6265ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6266is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6267@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6268
6269@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6270@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6271The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6272code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6273perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6274placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6275controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6276The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6277duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6278group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6279code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6280where they should be placed.
6281
6282The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6283@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6284placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6285branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6286placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6287value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6288exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6289A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6290linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6291from the input sections.
6292
6293The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6294@samp{N = +1}.
6295
1a51c1a4
NC
6296Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6297only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6298otherwise.
6299
36f63dca
NC
6300@ifclear GENERIC
6301@lowersections
6302@end ifclear
6303@end ifset
6304
6305@ifset HPPA
6306@ifclear GENERIC
6307@raisesections
6308@end ifclear
6309
6310@node HPPA ELF32
6311@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6312@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6313@kindex --multi-subspace
6314When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6315import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6316The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6317stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6318multiple sub-spaces.
6319
6320@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6321@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6322Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6323stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6324@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6325sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6326a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6327the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6328conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6329prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6330A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6331branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6332@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6333@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6334detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6335positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6336
6337Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6338single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6339create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6340large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6341
6342@ifclear GENERIC
6343@lowersections
6344@end ifclear
6345@end ifset
6346
7fb9f789
NC
6347@ifset M68K
6348@ifclear GENERIC
6349@raisesections
6350@end ifclear
6351
6352@node M68K
6353@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6354
6355@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6356@kindex --got=@var{type}
6357The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6358The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6359@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6360the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6361@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6362entries only at non-negative offsets.
6363@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6364entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6365support such GOTs.
6366@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6367output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6368file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6369files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6370
6371@ifclear GENERIC
6372@lowersections
6373@end ifclear
6374@end ifset
6375
36f63dca
NC
6376@ifset MMIX
6377@ifclear GENERIC
6378@raisesections
6379@end ifclear
6380
6381@node MMIX
6382@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6383For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6384@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6385understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6386can translate between the two formats.
6387
6388There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6389Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6390registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6391equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6392@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6393global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6394this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6395symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6396
7a2de473
HPN
6397Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6398@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6399The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6400of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6401
6402Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6403are left out from an mmo file.
6404
6405@ifclear GENERIC
6406@lowersections
6407@end ifclear
6408@end ifset
6409
6410@ifset MSP430
6411@ifclear GENERIC
6412@raisesections
6413@end ifclear
6414
6415@node MSP430
6416@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6417For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6418will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6419just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6420
6421@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6422The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6423
6424@table @code
6425@item @samp{.vectors}
6426Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6427
6428@item @samp{.bootloader}
6429Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6430in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6431
6432@item @samp{.infomem}
6433Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6434this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6435
c0065db7 6436@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6437This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6438in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6439
6440@item @samp{.noinit}
6441Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6442
c0065db7 6443The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6444@end table
6445
6446@ifclear GENERIC
6447@lowersections
6448@end ifclear
6449@end ifset
6450
2a60a7a8
AM
6451@ifset POWERPC
6452@ifclear GENERIC
6453@raisesections
6454@end ifclear
6455
6456@node PowerPC ELF32
6457@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6458@cindex PowerPC long branches
6459@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6460Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6461displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6462@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6463@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6464the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6465section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6466section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6467@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6468both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6469considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6470
6471@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6472@table @option
6473@cindex PowerPC PLT
6474@kindex --bss-plt
6475@item --bss-plt
6476Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6477generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6478the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6479writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6480@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6481PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6482compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6483BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6484
016687f8
AM
6485@kindex --secure-plt
6486@item --secure-plt
6487@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6488@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6489when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6490layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6491style BSS PLT.
6492
2a60a7a8
AM
6493@cindex PowerPC GOT
6494@kindex --sdata-got
6495@item --sdata-got
6496The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6497sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6498@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6499section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6500@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6501@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6502@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6503@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6504PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6505pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6506GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6507really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6508
6509@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6510@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6511@item --emit-stub-syms
6512This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6513symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6514
6515@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6516@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6517@item --no-tls-optimize
6518PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6519sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6520disable the optimization.
6521@end table
6522
6523@ifclear GENERIC
6524@lowersections
6525@end ifclear
6526@end ifset
6527
6528@ifset POWERPC64
6529@ifclear GENERIC
6530@raisesections
6531@end ifclear
6532
6533@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6534@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6535
6536@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6537@table @option
6538@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6539@kindex --stub-group-size
6540@item --stub-group-size
6541Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6542by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6543@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6544sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6545a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6546the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6547conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6548prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6549A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6550branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6551@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6552@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6553detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6554positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6555
6556Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6557single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6558create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6559large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6560
6561@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6562@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6563@item --emit-stub-syms
6564This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6565symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6566
6567@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6568@kindex --dotsyms
6569@kindex --no-dotsyms
6570@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6571These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6572in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6573function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6574code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6575properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6576to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6577@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6578dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6579feature.
6580
6581@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6582@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6583@item --no-tls-optimize
6584PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6585sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6586disable the optimization.
6587
6588@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6589@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6590@item --no-opd-optimize
6591PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6592corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6593the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6594Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6595
6596@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6597@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6598@item --non-overlapping-opd
6599Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6600@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6601the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6602entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6603
6604@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6605@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6606@item --no-toc-optimize
6607PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6608entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6609reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6610marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6611marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6612relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6613unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6614reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6615discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6616reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6617code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6618optimization.
6619
6620@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6621@kindex --no-multi-toc
6622@item --no-multi-toc
6623By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6624entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6625total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6626grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6627TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6628calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6629help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
663064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6631Use this option to turn off this feature.
6632@end table
6633
6634@ifclear GENERIC
6635@lowersections
6636@end ifclear
6637@end ifset
6638
49fa1e15
AM
6639@ifset SPU
6640@ifclear GENERIC
6641@raisesections
6642@end ifclear
6643
6644@node SPU ELF
6645@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6646
6647@cindex SPU ELF options
6648@table @option
6649
6650@cindex SPU plugins
6651@kindex --plugin
6652@item --plugin
6653This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6654
6655@cindex SPU overlays
6656@kindex --no-overlays
6657@item --no-overlays
6658Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6659regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6660@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6661turns off all this special overlay handling.
6662
6663@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6664@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6665@item --emit-stub-syms
6666This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6667symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6668
6669@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6670@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6671@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6672This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6673function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6674on calls to non-overlay regions.
6675
6676@cindex SPU local store size
6677@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6678@item --local-store=lo:hi
6679@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6680the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6681range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6682
c0065db7 6683@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6684@kindex --stack-analysis
6685@item --stack-analysis
6686SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6687unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6688under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6689@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6690@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6691determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6692for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6693for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6694for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6695find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6696and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6697under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6698dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6699is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6700and calls will be given.
6701
c0065db7 6702@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6703@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6704@item --emit-stack-syms
6705This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6706in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6707These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6708functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6709functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6710such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6711The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6712@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6713@end table
6714
6715@ifclear GENERIC
6716@lowersections
6717@end ifclear
6718@end ifset
6719
36f63dca
NC
6720@ifset TICOFF
6721@ifclear GENERIC
6722@raisesections
6723@end ifclear
6724
6725@node TI COFF
6726@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6727@cindex TI COFF versions
6728@kindex --format=@var{version}
6729The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6730TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6731also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6732format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6733header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6734
6735@ifclear GENERIC
6736@lowersections
6737@end ifclear
6738@end ifset
6739
2ca22b03
NC
6740@ifset WIN32
6741@ifclear GENERIC
6742@raisesections
6743@end ifclear
6744
6745@node WIN32
6746@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6747
c0065db7 6748This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6749See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6750command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6751
6752@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6753@cindex import libraries
6754@item import libraries
69da35b5 6755The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6756libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6757regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6758archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6759support for creating such libraries provided with the
6760@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6761
c0065db7
RM
6762@item exporting DLL symbols
6763@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6764The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6765
6766@table @emph
6767@item using auto-export functionality
6768@cindex using auto-export functionality
6769By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6770which is controlled by the following command line options:
6771
0a5d968e
NC
6772@itemize
6773@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6774@item --exclude-symbols
6775@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6776@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6777@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6778@end itemize
6779
09e2aba4
DK
6780When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6781(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6782symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6783often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6784private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6785options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6786exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6787final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6788
6789If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6790command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6791if either of the following are true:
6792
6793@itemize
6794@item A DEF file is used.
6795@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6796@end itemize
dc8465bf 6797
c0065db7
RM
6798@item using a DEF file
6799@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6800Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6801an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6802exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6803name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6804command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6805
6806@example
6807gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6808@end example
6809
0a5d968e
NC
6810Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6811@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6812
dc8465bf
NC
6813Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6814
6815@example
4b5bd4e7 6816LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6817
6818EXPORTS
6819foo
6820bar
6821_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6822another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6823var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6824doo = foo == foo2
6825eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6826@end example
dc8465bf 6827
7fcab871 6828This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6829symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6830alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6831by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6832@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6833@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6834export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6835in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6836symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6837
6b31ad16
DS
6838The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6839name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6840the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6841
b45619c0
NC
6842When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6843library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6844@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6845executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6846
6847With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6848specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6849non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6850
6851If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6852or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6853filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6854
4b5bd4e7
DS
6855The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6856
6857@example
6858EXPORTS
6859 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6860 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6861 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6862@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6863
6864Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6865@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6866@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6867@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6868Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6869@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6870string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6871
6872The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6873
6874@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6875will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6876by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6877linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6878library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6879
6880@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6881The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6882the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6883@code{*_imp__foo}).
6884
6885@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6886well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6887read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6888variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6889the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6890extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6891application will behave unexpectedly.
6892
6893@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6894it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6895symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6896API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6897the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6898
4b5bd4e7
DS
6899See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6900other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6901
6902@cindex creating a DEF file
6903While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6904with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6905
6906@item Using decorations
6907@cindex Using decorations
6908Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6909itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6910declared as:
6911
6912@example
6913__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6914__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6915@end example
6916
6917All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6918any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6919this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6920the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6921
6922Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6923decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6924instead:
6925
6926@example
6927__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6928__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6929@end example
6930
c0065db7
RM
6931This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6932when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6933variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6934code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6935of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6936omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6937@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6938information.
c0065db7 6939@end table
dc8465bf 6940
2ca22b03
NC
6941@cindex automatic data imports
6942@item automatic data imports
6943The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6944by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6945compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6946issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6947code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6948c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6949initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6950decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6951platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6952command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6953The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6954suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6955trigger the feature's use.
6956
c0065db7 6957auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6958additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6959
c0065db7 6960"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6961documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6962
c0065db7
RM
6963The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6964occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6965One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6966below.
6967
6968@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6969For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6970object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6971offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6972field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6973in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6974without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6975The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6976references.
6977
c0065db7
RM
6978The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6979be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6980themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6981runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6982compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6983support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6984run without error on an older system.
6985
c0065db7
RM
6986@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6987enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6988
6989@cindex direct linking to a dll
6990@item direct linking to a dll
6991The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6992including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6993libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6994traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6995libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6996function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6997though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6998storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6999tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7000large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7001
c0065db7 7002Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7003@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7004of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7005perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7006select the dll instead of an import library.
7007
2ca22b03 7008
69da35b5
NC
7009For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7010to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7011
7012@example
45e948fe
NC
7013libxxx.dll.a
7014xxx.dll.a
7015libxxx.a
7016xxx.lib
69da35b5 7017cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7018libxxx.dll
7019xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7020@end example
7021
69da35b5
NC
7022before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7023
c0065db7
RM
7024(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7025where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7026@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7027file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7028@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7029
c0065db7
RM
7030Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7031@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7032was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7033various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7034could coexist on the same machine.
7035
2ca22b03
NC
7036The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7037applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7038libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7039
7040@example
7041bin/
7042 cygxxx.dll
7043lib/
7044 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7045 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7046@end example
7047
c0065db7
RM
7048Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7049done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7050
70511. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7052@example
7053gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7054@end example
2ca22b03 7055
69da35b5
NC
7056However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7057(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7058@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7059not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7060
2ca22b03
NC
70612. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7062directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7063should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7064making the app/dll.
7065
7066@example
7067ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7068@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7069
7070Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7071
7072@example
7073gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7074@end example
69da35b5
NC
7075
7076This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7077perfectly legal
7078
7079@example
7080bin/
7081 cygxxx-5.dll
7082lib/
c0065db7 7083 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7084@end example
7085
dc8465bf 7086Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7087even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7088@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7089
7090Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7091wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7092
70931. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7094work with auto-imported data.
7095
dc8465bf
NC
70962. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7097import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7098symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7099for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7100possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7101
45e948fe
NC
71023. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7103critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7104in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7105stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7106
69da35b5 7107So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7108true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7109a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7110binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7111massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7112requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7113will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7114
c0065db7 7115@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7116@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7117@item adding additional names
7118Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7119A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7120exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7121when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7122import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7123
c0065db7 7124@example
dc8465bf
NC
7125LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7126
7127EXPORTS
c0065db7 7128foo
dc8465bf 7129_foo = foo
c0065db7 7130@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7131
7132The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7133
7134Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7135source code using the "weak" attribute:
7136
c0065db7
RM
7137@example
7138void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7139void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7140@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7141
7142See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7143symbols.
7144
7145@item renaming symbols
7146Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7147kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7148@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7149DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7150created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7151
c0065db7 7152@example
dc8465bf
NC
7153LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7154
7155EXPORTS
7156_foo = foo
c0065db7 7157@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7158
7159The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7160@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7161@end table
dc8465bf 7162
0a5d968e 7163Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7164unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7165If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7166@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7167that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7168@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7169renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7170to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7171the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7172In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7173which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7174
7175@cindex weak externals
7176@item weak externals
7177The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7178weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7179defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7180are three variants of weak externals:
7181@itemize
7182@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7183called lazy externals.
7184@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7185This form is not presently implemented.
7186@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7187implemented.
7188@end itemize
7189As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7190are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7191uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7192
7193@cindex aligned common symbols
7194@item aligned common symbols
7195As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7196desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7197the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7198carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7199by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7200tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7201but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7202warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7203@end table
7204
7205@ifclear GENERIC
7206@lowersections
7207@end ifclear
7208@end ifset
7209
e0001a05
NC
7210@ifset XTENSA
7211@ifclear GENERIC
7212@raisesections
7213@end ifclear
7214
7215@node Xtensa
7216@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7217
7218@cindex Xtensa processors
7219The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7220@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7221specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7222keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7223example, with the command:
7224
7225@smallexample
7226SECTIONS
7227@{
7228 .text : @{
7229 *(.literal .text)
7230 @}
7231@}
7232@end smallexample
7233
7234@noindent
7235@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7236and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7237literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7238interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7239group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7240files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7241and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7242
43cd72b9 7243@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7244@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7245Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7246provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7247is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7248literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7249will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7250location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7251the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7252unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7253@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7254range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7255
7256For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7257to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7258instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7259instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7260instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7261@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7262hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7263By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7264switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7265density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7266instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7267performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7268linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7269a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7270
7271The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7272control the linker:
7273
7274@cindex Xtensa options
7275@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7276@item --size-opt
7277When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7278more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7279no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7280alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7281preserve the correctness of the code.
7282@end table
e0001a05
NC
7283
7284@ifclear GENERIC
7285@lowersections
7286@end ifclear
7287@end ifset
7288
252b5132
RH
7289@ifclear SingleFormat
7290@node BFD
7291@chapter BFD
7292
7293@cindex back end
7294@cindex object file management
7295@cindex object formats available
7296@kindex objdump -i
7297The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7298These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7299object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7300format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7301it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7302associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7303object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7304(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7305list all the formats available for your configuration.
7306
7307@cindex BFD requirements
7308@cindex requirements for BFD
7309As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7310several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7311BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7312formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7313been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7314BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7315may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7316
7317One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7318mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7319useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7320conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7321
7322@menu
7323* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7324@end menu
7325
7326@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7327@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7328@cindex opening object files
7329@include bfdsumm.texi
7330@end ifclear
7331
7332@node Reporting Bugs
7333@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7334@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7335@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7336
ff5dcc92 7337Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7338
7339Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7340it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7341to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7342work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7343@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7344
7345In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7346information that enables us to fix the bug.
7347
7348@menu
7349* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7350* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7351@end menu
7352
7353@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7354@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7355@cindex bug criteria
7356
7357If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7358
7359@itemize @bullet
7360@cindex fatal signal
7361@cindex linker crash
7362@cindex crash of linker
7363@item
7364If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7365@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7366
7367@cindex error on valid input
7368@item
ff5dcc92 7369If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7370
7371@cindex invalid input
7372@item
ff5dcc92 7373If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7374may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7375object files are correct.
7376
7377@item
7378If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7379improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7380@end itemize
7381
7382@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7383@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7384@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7385@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7386
7387A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7388products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7389recommend you contact that organization first.
7390
7391You can find contact information for many support companies and
7392individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7393distribution.
7394
ad22bfe8 7395@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7396Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7397@value{BUGURL}.
7398@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7399
7400The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7401@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7402fact or leave it out, state it!
7403
7404Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7405problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7406assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7407matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7408the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7409location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7410were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7411into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7412specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7413and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7414
7415Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7416the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7417on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7418
7419Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7420bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7421respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7422You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7423
7424To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7425
7426@itemize @bullet
7427@item
ff5dcc92 7428The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7429the @samp{--version} argument.
7430
7431Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7432the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7433
7434@item
ff5dcc92 7435Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7436patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7437
7438@item
7439The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7440version number.
7441
7442@item
ff5dcc92 7443What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7444``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7445
7446@item
7447The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7448observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7449list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7450sufficient.
7451
7452If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7453and then we might not encounter the bug.
7454
7455@item
7456A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7457bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7458provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7459bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7460state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7461requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7462we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7463attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7464
7465If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7466@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7467object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7468@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7469how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7470
7471@item
7472A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7473incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7474
ff5dcc92 7475Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7476will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7477not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7478a chance to make a mistake.
7479
7480Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7481say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7482copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7483C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7484and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7485fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7486you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7487any conclusion from our observations.
7488
7489@item
ff5dcc92 7490If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7491diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7492@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7493If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7494context, not by line number.
7495
7496The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7497sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7498@end itemize
7499
7500Here are some things that are not necessary:
7501
7502@itemize @bullet
7503@item
7504A description of the envelope of the bug.
7505
7506Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7507which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7508changes will not affect it.
7509
7510This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7511will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7512with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7513We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7514
7515Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7516of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7517output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7518less time, and so on.
7519
7520However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7521report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7522
7523@item
7524A patch for the bug.
7525
7526A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7527the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7528a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7529to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7530
ff5dcc92 7531Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7532construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7533through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7534able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7535fixed.
7536
7537And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7538patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7539help us to understand.
7540
7541@item
7542A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7543
7544Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7545things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7546@end itemize
7547
7548@node MRI
7549@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7550@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7551To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7552linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7553alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7554described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7555simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7556@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7557linker commands; these commands are described here.
7558
7559In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7560file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7561features to make use of them.
7562
7563You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7564@samp{-c} command-line option.
7565
7566Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7567command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7568blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7569MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7570issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7571
7572Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7573
7574You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7575lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7576The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7577
7578@table @code
7579@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7580@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7581@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7582Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7583the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7584@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7585your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7586script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7587commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7588input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7589@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7590
7591@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7592@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7593Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7594in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7595
7596@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7597
7598@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7599@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7600Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7601@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7602
7603@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7604@item BASE @var{expression}
7605Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7606absolute addresses) in the output file.
7607
7608@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7609@item CHIP @var{expression}
7610@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7611This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7612
7613@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7614@item END
7615This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7616
7617@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7618@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7619Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7620language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7621
7622@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7623@item
252b5132
RH
7624S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7625
7626@item
7627IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7628
7629@item
7630COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7631@samp{COFF}
7632@end enumerate
7633
7634@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7635@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7636Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7637@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7638
7639The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7640same line, with no change in its effect.
7641
7642@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7643@item LOAD @var{filename}
7644@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7645Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7646same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7647command line.
7648
7649@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7650@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7651@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7652MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7653option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7654
7655@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7656@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7657@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7658Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7659order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7660script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7661sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7662file, in the order specified.
7663
7664@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7665@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7666@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7667@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7668Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7669@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7670
7671@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7672@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7673@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7674@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7675You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7676specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7677If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7678@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7679@end table
7680
793c5807
NC
7681@node GNU Free Documentation License
7682@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7683@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7684
370b66a1
CD
7685@node LD Index
7686@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7687
7688@printindex cp
7689
7690@tex
7691% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7692% meantime:
7693\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7694\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7695\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7696\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7697\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7698\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7699\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7700\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7701\page\colophon
7702% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7703@end tex
7704
252b5132 7705@bye
This page took 0.997603 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.